1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2009 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "COPYING" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{auxinfo}{This release is dedicated to the memory of Charles A. Crayne. We miss you, Chuck.}
43 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
46 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
47 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
53 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
54 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
55 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
56 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
57 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
58 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
79 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
80 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
81 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
84 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
85 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
87 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
89 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
91 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
93 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
95 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
96 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
97 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
99 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>} \c{>} operator
101 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
102 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
103 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
104 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
105 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
106 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
107 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
108 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
109 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
111 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
112 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
113 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
114 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
115 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
116 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
117 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
119 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
120 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
122 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
123 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
124 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
125 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
127 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
128 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
129 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
130 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
131 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
132 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
133 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
135 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
136 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
137 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
138 \IA{command line}{command-line}
139 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
142 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
143 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
144 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
146 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
147 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
148 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
149 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
152 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
153 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
155 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
156 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
157 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
158 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
160 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
161 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
162 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
163 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
164 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
165 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
166 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
168 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
169 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
170 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
172 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
173 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
174 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
176 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
177 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
178 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
179 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
180 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
181 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
182 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
183 \IR{logical and} logical AND
184 \IR{logical or} logical OR
185 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
187 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
189 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
190 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
191 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
192 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
193 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
194 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
196 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
197 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
199 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
203 \IR{operating system} operating system
205 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
206 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
211 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
212 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
213 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
214 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
215 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
216 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
217 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
218 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
220 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
221 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
222 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
223 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
224 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
225 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
226 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
227 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
228 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
229 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
230 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
231 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
232 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
234 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
235 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
236 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
237 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
238 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
239 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
240 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
242 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
248 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
249 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
250 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
251 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
252 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
253 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
254 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
256 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
257 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
258 \IR{www page} WWW page
262 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
263 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
264 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
265 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
266 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
267 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
268 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
271 \C{intro} Introduction
273 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
275 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
276 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
277 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
278 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
279 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
280 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
281 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
282 strong support for macros.
285 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
287 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
288 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
289 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
290 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
292 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
293 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
295 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
296 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
297 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
298 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
299 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
302 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
303 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
305 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
308 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
309 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
310 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
311 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
312 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
314 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
315 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
316 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
317 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
318 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
319 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
323 \S{legal} License Conditions
325 Please see the file \c{COPYING}, supplied as part of any NASM
326 distribution archive, for the \i{license} conditions under which you
327 may use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called GNU Lesser General
328 Public License, LGPL.
331 \H{contact} Contact Information
333 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
334 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
335 (see below for the link).
336 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
338 NASM has a \i{WWW page} at
339 \W{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}\c{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}. If it's
340 not there, google for us!
343 The original authors are \i{e\-mail}able as
344 \W{mailto:jules@dsf.org.uk}\c{jules@dsf.org.uk} and
345 \W{mailto:anakin@pobox.com}\c{anakin@pobox.com}.
346 The latter is no longer involved in the development team.
348 \i{New releases} of NASM are uploaded to the official sites
349 \W{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}\c{http://nasm.sourceforge.net}
351 \W{ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/devel/nasm/}\i\c{ftp.kernel.org}
353 \W{ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/devel/lang/assemblers/}\i\c{ibiblio.org}.
355 Announcements are posted to
356 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
357 \W{news:alt.lang.asm}\i\c{alt.lang.asm} and
358 \W{news:comp.os.linux.announce}\i\c{comp.os.linux.announce}
360 If you want information about NASM beta releases, and the current
361 development status, please subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list
363 \W{http://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm}\c{http://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm}.
366 \H{install} Installation
368 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
370 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
371 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
372 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
373 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
375 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
376 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
377 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
380 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
381 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
382 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
383 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
384 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
385 under other versions of Windows as well.)
387 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
388 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
389 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
390 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
392 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
393 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
394 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
395 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
398 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
399 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
400 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
401 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
402 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
403 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
404 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
405 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
408 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
410 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
411 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
412 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
413 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
414 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
416 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
417 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
418 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
419 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
422 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
423 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
424 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
425 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
426 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
427 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
428 install the programs yourself.
430 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
431 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
432 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
433 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
436 \C{running} Running NASM
438 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
440 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
442 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
446 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
448 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
450 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
452 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
454 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
455 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
456 to give a listing file name, for example:
458 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
460 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
464 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
467 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
472 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
473 installed it). If it says something like
475 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
477 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
478 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
480 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
482 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
483 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
484 and are rare these days.)
486 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
487 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
491 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
493 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
494 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
495 For Microsoft object file formats (\i\c{obj} and \i\c{win32}), it
496 will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
497 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
498 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\i\c{aout},
499 \i\c{coff}, \i\c{elf}, \i\c{macho} and \i\c{as86}) it will substitute \c{.o}. For
500 \i\c{rdf}, it will use \c{.rdf}, and for the \i\c{bin} format it
501 will simply remove the extension, so that \c{myfile.asm} produces
502 the output file \c{myfile}.
504 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
505 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
506 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
508 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
509 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
510 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
511 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
512 an intervening space. For example:
514 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
515 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
517 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
518 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
521 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
523 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
524 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
525 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
526 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
527 choose what you want the default to be.
529 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
530 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
532 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
533 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
536 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
538 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
539 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
540 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
541 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
542 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
543 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
546 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
548 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
549 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
550 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
551 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
552 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
555 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
557 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
558 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
560 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
563 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
565 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
566 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
567 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
568 dependency list without a prefix.
571 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
573 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
574 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
576 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
579 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
581 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
582 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
583 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
584 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
585 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
587 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
590 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
592 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
593 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
594 specified by the \c{-o} option.
597 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
599 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
600 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
601 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
605 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
607 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
608 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
609 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
610 file has been removed.
613 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
615 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
616 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
617 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
618 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
619 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
620 if \c{-F} is specified.
622 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
623 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
624 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
626 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
627 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
628 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
631 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
633 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
634 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
635 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
636 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
637 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
640 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
642 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
643 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
645 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
646 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
647 the default and looks like this:
649 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
651 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
652 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
653 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
654 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
655 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
657 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
658 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
660 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
662 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
663 instead of being delimited by colons.
665 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
667 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
669 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
670 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
671 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
672 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
673 example) you want to load them into an editor.
675 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
676 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
677 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
678 the errors into a file by typing
680 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
682 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
683 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
684 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
686 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
688 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
689 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
690 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
691 program, you can type:
693 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
695 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
698 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
700 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
701 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
702 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
703 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
704 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
705 library}, for example, by typing
707 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
709 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
712 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
713 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
714 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
715 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
716 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
717 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
719 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
720 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
721 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
723 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
724 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
725 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
728 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
729 be specified as \c{-I}.
732 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
734 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
735 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
738 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
740 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
741 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
743 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
744 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
747 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
749 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
750 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
751 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
754 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
756 as an alternative to placing the directive
760 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
761 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
762 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
763 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
766 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
767 be specified as \c{-D}.
770 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
772 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
773 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
774 option specified earlier on the command lines.
776 For example, the following command line:
778 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
780 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
781 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
784 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
785 be specified as \c{-U}.
788 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
790 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
791 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
792 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
793 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
794 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
795 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
797 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
798 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
799 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
801 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
803 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
805 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
806 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
807 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
809 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
811 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
812 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
813 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
814 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
815 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
816 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
819 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
821 NASM defaults to not optimizing operands which can fit into a signed byte.
822 This means that if you want the shortest possible object code,
823 you have to enable optimization.
825 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
826 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
828 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
829 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
830 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
832 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
833 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
834 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
835 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
837 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
838 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
839 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
840 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatability with earlier
841 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
842 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
844 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses.
846 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
847 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
850 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
852 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
853 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
855 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
857 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
858 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
859 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
860 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
861 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
864 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
865 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
866 \c{include}, \c{local})
868 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
870 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
871 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
872 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
873 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
874 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
875 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
878 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
879 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
880 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
881 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
882 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
883 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
884 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
886 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
888 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
889 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
890 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
891 you might want to disable it.
893 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
894 warning class is disabled by default.
896 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
897 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
898 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
900 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
901 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
902 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
903 see \k{syntax} for more information.
905 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
906 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
908 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
909 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
910 This warning class is disabled by default.
912 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
915 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
918 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
921 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
924 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
927 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
930 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
931 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
933 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
934 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
935 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
936 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
937 (without the brackets) exists.
939 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
940 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
941 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
944 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
946 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
947 and the date on which it was compiled.
949 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
951 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
953 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
954 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
955 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
959 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
960 \c ('*' denotes default):
961 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
962 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
965 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
967 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
968 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
969 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
970 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
971 (but not always) likes it.
974 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
976 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
977 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
978 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
979 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
980 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
982 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
983 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib} will be treated as two separate options.
984 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
985 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
986 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
987 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
989 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
990 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
991 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
992 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
993 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
994 -ic:\\nasmlib}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
996 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
997 changed with version 0.98.31.
1000 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1002 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1003 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1004 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1005 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1006 skipping this section.
1009 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1011 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1012 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1013 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1014 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1015 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1016 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1017 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1020 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1022 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1023 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1024 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1025 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1026 if you declare, for example,
1031 then the two lines of code
1036 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1037 identical-looking syntaxes.
1039 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1040 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1041 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1042 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1043 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1044 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1045 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1046 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1048 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1049 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1050 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1051 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1052 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1053 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1055 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1056 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1057 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1058 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1059 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1060 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1061 \e{everything} is a label.
1063 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1064 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1065 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1066 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1067 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1068 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1071 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1073 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1074 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1075 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1076 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1077 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1078 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1079 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1081 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1082 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1083 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1084 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1085 the strings being manipulated.
1088 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1090 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1091 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1092 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1093 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1096 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1098 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1099 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1100 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1101 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1102 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1103 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1104 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1105 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1106 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1110 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1112 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1113 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1114 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1115 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1117 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1118 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1119 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1120 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1123 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1125 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1126 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1128 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1129 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1130 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1131 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1132 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1133 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1134 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1136 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1137 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1141 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1143 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1145 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1146 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1147 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1149 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1151 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1152 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1153 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1154 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1156 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1157 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1158 backslash-ended line.
1160 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1161 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1162 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1163 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1164 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1165 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1166 NASM with the command-line option
1167 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1168 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1170 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1171 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1172 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1173 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1174 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1175 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1176 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1177 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1178 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1179 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1181 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1182 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1183 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1184 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1185 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1186 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1187 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1188 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1189 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1190 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1191 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1192 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1193 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1194 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1197 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1198 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1199 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1201 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1202 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1204 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1205 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1206 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1207 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1208 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1209 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1211 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1212 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1213 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1215 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1217 For example, you can code:
1219 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1220 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1222 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1223 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1225 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1226 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1227 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1230 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1232 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1233 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1234 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1235 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1236 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1237 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1238 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1242 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1244 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1245 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1246 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1247 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1249 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1250 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1251 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1252 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1253 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1254 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1255 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1256 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1257 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1258 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1259 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1260 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1261 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1263 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1266 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1268 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1269 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1270 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1271 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1272 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1273 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1274 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1275 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1276 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1280 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1281 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1282 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1283 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1285 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1287 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1288 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1289 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1290 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1293 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1294 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1295 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1296 \c ; actually include at most 512
1298 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1299 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1300 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1301 overridden if desired.
1304 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1306 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1307 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1308 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1309 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1312 \c message db 'hello, world'
1313 \c msglen equ $-message
1315 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1316 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1317 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1318 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1319 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1320 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1323 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1325 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1326 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1327 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1330 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1332 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1333 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1334 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1336 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1337 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1339 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1340 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1341 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1345 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1346 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1347 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1349 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1351 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1352 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1353 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1354 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1355 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1358 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1360 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1361 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1362 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1363 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1368 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1369 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1371 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1372 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1374 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1375 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1377 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1380 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1381 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1384 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1385 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1387 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1388 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1389 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1390 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1391 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1392 bytes to store a zero offset.
1394 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1395 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1396 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1397 default segment registers.
1399 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1400 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1401 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1402 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1403 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1404 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1405 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1406 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1407 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1408 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1409 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1411 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1412 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1413 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1414 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1415 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1416 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1417 the offset to be lost.
1419 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1420 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1421 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1422 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1423 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1424 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1426 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1427 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1428 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1429 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1432 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1434 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1435 character, string and floating-point.
1438 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1440 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1441 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1442 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} for \i{hexadecimal},
1443 \i{octal} and \i{binary} respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x} for
1444 hexadecimal in the style of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal
1445 in the style of Borland Pascal. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1446 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1447 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1448 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1449 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0o} or
1450 \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} for binary. Please note that unlike C, a
1451 \c{0} prefix by itself does \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1453 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1456 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1458 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1459 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1460 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1461 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1462 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1463 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1464 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1465 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1466 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1467 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1468 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1469 \c mov ax,0q310 ; hex yet again
1470 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1471 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1472 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1474 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1476 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1477 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1478 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1479 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1480 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1481 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1482 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1485 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1487 \c \' single quote (')
1488 \c \" double quote (")
1490 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1491 \c \? question mark (?)
1499 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1500 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1501 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1502 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1503 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1505 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1506 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1509 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1510 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1512 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1513 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1514 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1517 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1519 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1520 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1522 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1523 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1527 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1528 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1529 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1530 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1531 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1534 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1536 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1537 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1538 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1539 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1540 certain preprocessor directives.
1542 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1543 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1544 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1546 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1547 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1549 And the following are also equivalent:
1551 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1552 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1553 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1555 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1556 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1557 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1558 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1559 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1560 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1562 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1564 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1565 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1566 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1570 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1571 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1573 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1574 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1576 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1577 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1578 an expression context.
1580 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1582 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1583 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1584 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1585 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1586 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1587 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1589 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1590 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1591 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1592 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1593 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant. NASM also
1594 support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x}, hexadecimal
1595 digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then optionally a
1596 \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent in decimal
1599 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1600 floating-point constants as well.
1604 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1605 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1606 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1607 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1608 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1609 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1610 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1611 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1612 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1613 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1614 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1616 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1617 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1618 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1619 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1620 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1622 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1623 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1624 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1625 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1626 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1627 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1628 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1629 floating-point number, respectively.
1633 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1635 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1636 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1638 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1640 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1641 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1642 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1643 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1644 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1645 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1646 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1647 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1648 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1650 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1651 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1652 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1653 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1655 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1656 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1658 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1660 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1662 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1663 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1664 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1666 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1671 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1672 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1677 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1679 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1680 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1683 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1684 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1685 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1686 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1687 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1688 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1689 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1691 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1692 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1695 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1697 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1698 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1699 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1702 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1704 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1707 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1709 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1712 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1714 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1715 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1716 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1717 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1718 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1721 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1722 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1724 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1728 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1729 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1731 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1732 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1733 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1734 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1735 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1737 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1738 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1740 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1741 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1742 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1745 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1746 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1748 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1749 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1750 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1751 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1752 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1753 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1756 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1758 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1759 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1760 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1761 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1763 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1764 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1765 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1767 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1771 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1773 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1774 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1775 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1776 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1777 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1779 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1781 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1783 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1784 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1786 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1787 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1788 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1789 could code either of
1791 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1792 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1794 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1795 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1798 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1799 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1800 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1802 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1805 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1807 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1808 invent one using the macro processor.
1811 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1813 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1814 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1815 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1816 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1817 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1818 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1819 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1823 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1825 \c push strict dword 33
1827 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1830 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1831 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1834 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1836 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1837 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1838 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1840 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1841 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1842 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1843 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1844 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1846 \c times (label-$) db 0
1847 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1849 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1850 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1851 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1852 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1855 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1856 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1858 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1861 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1862 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1863 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1864 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1865 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1867 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1869 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1870 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1871 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1872 label. So, for example:
1874 \c label1 ; some code
1882 \c label2 ; some code
1890 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1891 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1892 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1893 previous non-local label.
1895 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1896 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1897 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1898 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1899 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1900 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1901 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1904 \c label3 ; some more code
1909 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1910 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1911 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1912 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1913 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1914 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1915 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1916 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1917 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1918 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1920 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1921 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1922 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1923 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1924 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1926 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1928 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1929 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1930 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}).
1933 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1935 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1936 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1937 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1938 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1941 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1942 character into a single line. Thus:
1944 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1947 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1950 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1952 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1954 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1955 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1958 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1959 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1961 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
1963 which will expand to
1965 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
1967 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
1968 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
1969 not at definition time. Thus the code
1971 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
1976 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
1977 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
1979 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
1980 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
1981 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
1982 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
1983 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
1984 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
1987 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
1988 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
1989 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
1990 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
1993 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
1997 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
1998 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
1999 for an example of its use.
2001 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2002 macros: if you write
2004 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2005 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2007 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2008 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2009 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2014 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2015 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2016 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2018 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2019 perfectly well define a macro with
2023 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2027 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2028 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2029 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2031 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2032 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2035 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2037 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2038 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2039 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2040 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2041 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2043 Suppose you have the following code:
2046 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2055 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2056 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2057 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2058 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2059 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2062 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2063 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2064 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2066 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2067 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2068 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2072 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2076 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2077 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2078 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2081 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2083 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2084 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2085 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2086 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2088 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2090 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2091 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2093 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2094 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2096 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2098 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2099 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2102 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2104 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2105 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2106 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2108 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2109 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2111 As an example, consider the following:
2113 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2115 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2121 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2124 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2125 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2127 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2128 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2130 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2132 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2134 Now the above code can be written as:
2136 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2137 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2139 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2140 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2143 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2145 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2146 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2147 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2148 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2149 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2150 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2154 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2166 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2168 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2169 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2171 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2174 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2176 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2177 example, the following sequence:
2184 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2185 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2187 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2188 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2192 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2194 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2195 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2196 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2197 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2199 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2200 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2201 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2202 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2204 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2205 later, so you can do things like
2209 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2211 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2212 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2213 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2215 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2216 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2217 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2218 involving a register).
2221 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2223 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2224 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2225 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2230 \c %defstr test TEST
2234 \c %define test 'TEST'
2236 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2239 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2242 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2244 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2245 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2246 more complex operations can be constructed.
2248 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2249 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2250 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2251 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2253 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2255 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2256 a single-line macro.
2260 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2262 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2265 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2267 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2269 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2272 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2274 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2277 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2279 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2280 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2281 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2282 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2284 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2285 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2287 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2288 assigned the value of 9.
2291 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2293 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2294 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2295 than the description:
2297 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2298 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2299 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2300 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2301 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2302 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2304 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2305 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2306 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2307 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2308 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2309 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2310 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2311 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2312 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2315 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2317 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2318 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2321 \c %macro prologue 1
2329 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2330 invoke the macro with a call such as
2332 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2334 which would expand to the three lines of code
2340 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2341 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2342 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2343 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2344 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2347 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2348 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2350 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2351 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2352 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2361 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2362 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2363 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2366 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2368 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2369 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2370 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2371 parameters at all. So you could define
2373 \c %macro prologue 0
2380 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2381 allocates no local stack space.
2383 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2384 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2393 so that you could code
2395 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2396 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2398 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2399 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2400 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2401 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2402 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2403 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2406 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2408 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2409 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2410 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2411 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2412 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2413 flag is set by doing this:
2423 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2424 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2425 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2426 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2427 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2428 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2429 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2430 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2431 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2434 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2436 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2437 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2438 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2439 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2440 you might want to be able to write
2442 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2444 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2445 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2446 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2447 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2450 \c %macro writefile 2+
2456 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2463 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2464 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2465 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2466 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2469 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2470 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2473 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2474 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2475 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2476 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2477 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2478 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2479 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2482 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2483 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2486 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2488 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2489 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2492 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2495 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2497 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2498 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2499 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2501 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2509 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2510 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2511 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2512 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2513 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2515 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2516 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2517 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2518 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2520 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2522 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2523 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2524 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2525 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2527 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2528 too many default parameters:
2530 \c %macro quux 1 something
2532 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2534 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2535 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2536 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2537 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2538 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2540 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2541 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2542 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2543 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2544 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2546 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2547 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2548 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2550 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2552 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2553 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2554 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2557 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2559 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2560 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2561 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2562 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2563 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2564 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2567 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2569 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2570 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2571 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2572 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2573 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2574 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2576 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2577 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2578 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2579 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2581 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2582 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2583 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2584 parameters are rotated to the right.
2586 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2587 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2589 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2598 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2599 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2600 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2601 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2602 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2603 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2604 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2606 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2607 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2608 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2610 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2611 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2612 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2613 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2614 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2615 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2616 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2618 This can be done by the following definition:
2620 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2629 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2630 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2631 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2632 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2633 iterated through in reverse order.
2636 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2638 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2639 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2640 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2641 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2642 table, you could code something like
2644 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2646 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2652 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2653 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2654 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2656 which would expand to
2659 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2661 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2663 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2666 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2667 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2669 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2670 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2671 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2672 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2673 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2674 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2675 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2677 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2678 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2679 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2680 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2681 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2682 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2683 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2684 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2685 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2686 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2688 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2689 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2690 purpose of concatenation.
2692 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2695 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2697 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2698 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2699 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2700 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2701 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2702 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2705 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2706 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2707 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2708 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2718 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2719 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2720 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2723 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2724 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2725 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2726 because no inverse condition code exists.
2729 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2731 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2732 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2733 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2734 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2735 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2738 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2739 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2740 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2741 the number of parameters, like this:
2743 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2747 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2749 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2751 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2752 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2753 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2754 that argument specification.
2763 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2770 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2771 specification does not match exactly.
2773 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2775 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2776 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2777 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2780 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2781 \c %elif<condition2>
2782 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2784 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2787 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2789 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2790 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2792 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2793 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2794 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2795 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2797 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2798 single-line macro existence}
2800 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2801 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2802 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2803 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2805 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2808 \c ; perform some function
2810 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2812 \c ; go and do something else
2814 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2815 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2816 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2818 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2819 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2820 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2824 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2825 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2827 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2828 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2830 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2831 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2832 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2835 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2836 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2838 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2840 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2844 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2846 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2852 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2853 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2856 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2857 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2858 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2861 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2864 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2865 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
2866 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
2867 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
2868 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
2870 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
2871 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
2874 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
2875 arbitrary numeric expressions}
2877 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
2878 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
2879 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
2880 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
2881 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
2883 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
2884 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
2886 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
2887 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
2888 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
2889 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
2890 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
2891 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
2892 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
2893 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
2894 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
2895 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
2896 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
2897 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
2898 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
2899 for true and 0 for false.
2901 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
2902 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
2904 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
2905 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
2907 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
2908 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
2909 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
2910 Differences in white space are not counted.
2912 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
2914 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
2915 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
2917 \c %macro pushparam 1
2928 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
2929 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
2930 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
2931 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
2933 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
2934 Types\I{testing, token types}
2936 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
2937 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
2938 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
2939 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
2942 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
2943 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
2944 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
2945 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
2946 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
2948 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
2949 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
2951 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
2960 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
2961 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2972 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
2973 the following two ways:
2975 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
2976 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
2978 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
2979 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
2980 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
2981 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
2983 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
2984 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
2985 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
2986 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
2987 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
2989 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
2990 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
2991 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
2992 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
2994 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
2996 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
2997 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
2998 versus a multi-token sequence.
3000 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3001 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3002 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3008 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3012 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3013 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3015 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3016 variants are also provided.
3018 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3020 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3021 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3022 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3024 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3025 variants are also provided.
3027 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3029 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3030 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3031 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3032 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3034 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3035 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3036 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3037 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3041 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3045 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3046 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3049 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3050 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3051 terminate the loop, like this:
3066 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3068 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3069 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3070 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3071 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3072 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3073 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3076 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3078 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3080 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3082 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3083 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3084 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3086 \c %include "macros.mac"
3088 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3089 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3091 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3092 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3093 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3094 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3095 line using the \c{-i} option.
3097 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3098 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3101 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3102 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3103 \c ; now define some macros
3106 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3107 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3108 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3110 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3111 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3112 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3115 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3117 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3118 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3119 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3120 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3124 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3126 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3127 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3130 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3132 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3133 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3134 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3136 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3137 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3138 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3140 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3141 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3146 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3147 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3148 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3151 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3153 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3154 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3155 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3156 described in \k{macropkg}.
3158 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3159 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3160 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3161 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3166 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3167 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3168 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3170 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3172 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3173 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3174 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3175 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3176 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3177 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3178 able to nest these loops.
3180 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3181 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3182 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3183 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3184 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3187 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3188 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3190 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3191 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3192 which is the name of the context. For example:
3196 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3197 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3198 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3199 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3200 single macro definition.)
3202 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3203 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3204 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3205 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3208 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3210 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3211 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3212 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3213 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3214 above could be implemented by means of:
3230 and invoked by means of, for example,
3238 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3241 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3242 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3243 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3246 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3248 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3249 a particular context, in just the same way:
3251 \c %define %$localmac 3
3253 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3254 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3255 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3258 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3260 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3261 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3262 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3263 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3264 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3266 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3267 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3268 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3273 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3276 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3278 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3279 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3280 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3296 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3310 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3315 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3316 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3317 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3318 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3321 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3322 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3323 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3324 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3325 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3327 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3328 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3329 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3330 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3331 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3333 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3355 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3356 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3357 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3358 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3361 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3363 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3364 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3366 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3368 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3370 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3373 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3375 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3376 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3377 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3379 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3380 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3381 convenient to use. and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3382 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3386 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3387 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3388 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3395 \c %pop ; restore original context
3397 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3398 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3399 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3400 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3403 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3405 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3406 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3407 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3408 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3409 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3413 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3414 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3415 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3417 \c %stacksize flat64
3419 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3420 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3421 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3425 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3426 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3427 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3431 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3432 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3433 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3434 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3435 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3436 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3437 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3441 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3443 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3444 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3445 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3446 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3447 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3448 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3449 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3451 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3452 An example of its use is the following:
3456 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3457 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3458 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3459 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3461 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3462 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3463 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3468 \c leave ; restore old bp
3471 \c %pop ; restore original context
3473 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3474 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3475 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3476 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3477 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3478 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3479 as shown in the example.
3482 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3484 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3485 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3486 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3487 right macros by means of code like this:
3492 \c ; do some different setup
3494 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3497 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3498 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3499 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3500 knowing what went wrong.
3502 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3507 \c ; do some different setup
3509 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3513 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3514 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3515 depend on symbol values.
3517 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3518 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3519 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3522 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3523 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3524 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3525 the user. For example:
3528 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3529 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3533 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3535 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3536 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3538 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3539 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3541 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3542 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3544 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3546 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3547 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3548 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3549 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3550 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3551 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3554 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3555 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3556 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3558 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3560 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3561 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3562 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3563 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3564 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3565 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3567 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3568 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3572 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3574 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3575 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3576 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3577 could be used at some other point in your code.
3579 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3580 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3581 could do that as follows:
3583 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3585 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3588 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3590 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3591 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3592 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3593 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3594 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3596 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3597 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3598 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3602 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3604 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3605 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3606 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3607 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3608 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3609 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3610 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3612 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3613 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3616 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3618 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3619 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3620 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3621 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3622 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3623 would be equivalent to:
3631 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3632 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3633 values will be present in memory.
3636 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3638 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3639 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3648 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3650 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3651 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3652 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3653 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3654 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3655 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3657 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3658 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3659 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3660 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3661 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3662 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3663 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3664 here'. You could then write a macro
3666 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3675 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3676 find the crash point.
3679 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3681 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3682 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3683 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3684 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3685 mode-dependent macros.
3687 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3689 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3690 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3693 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3694 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3695 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3696 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3700 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3702 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3705 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3706 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3709 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3710 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3711 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3713 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3714 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3715 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3716 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3718 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3719 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3720 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3721 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3724 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3725 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3726 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3727 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3728 local time as if it was UTC.
3730 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3731 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3732 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3733 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3734 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3737 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3738 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3739 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3740 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3741 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3742 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3743 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3744 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3745 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3748 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3751 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3752 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3753 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3754 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3756 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3757 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3760 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3762 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3763 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3764 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3765 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3767 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3768 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3769 change in future versions of NASM.}
3772 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
3774 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
3775 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
3776 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
3777 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
3779 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
3780 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
3781 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
3782 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
3783 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
3784 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
3785 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
3786 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
3789 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
3790 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
3801 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
3802 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
3803 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
3804 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
3806 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
3807 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
3808 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
3809 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
3820 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
3821 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
3823 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
3824 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
3825 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
3826 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
3827 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
3828 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
3829 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
3831 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
3832 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
3838 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
3840 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
3842 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
3845 \c struc mytype, -40
3847 And access an element this way:
3849 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
3852 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
3853 \i{Instances of Structures}
3855 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
3856 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
3857 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
3858 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
3859 you code something like this:
3864 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
3865 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
3866 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
3867 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
3871 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
3872 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
3873 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
3874 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
3875 they were specified in the structure definition.
3877 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
3878 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
3879 the \c{AT} line. For example:
3881 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
3884 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
3885 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
3889 \c db 'hello, world'
3893 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
3895 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
3896 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
3897 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
3898 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
3900 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
3901 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
3902 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
3903 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
3904 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
3906 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
3907 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
3908 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
3909 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
3910 perform the alignment.
3912 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
3913 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
3914 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
3915 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
3916 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
3917 except for special purposes.
3919 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
3920 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
3921 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
3922 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
3925 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
3926 be used within structure definitions:
3943 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
3944 relative to the base of the structure.
3946 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
3947 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
3948 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
3949 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
3950 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
3951 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
3952 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
3954 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
3957 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
3959 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
3960 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
3961 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
3962 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
3964 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
3968 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
3970 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
3971 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
3972 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
3973 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
3974 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
3975 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
3982 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
3988 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
3990 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
3991 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
3992 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
3993 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
3994 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
3995 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
3996 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
3999 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4000 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4001 and an optional jump threshold override. The modes are as
4004 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4005 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4008 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4009 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4010 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4012 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4013 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4016 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4017 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4020 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4021 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4022 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4023 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4025 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4026 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4027 are used internally by this macro package.
4030 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4032 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4033 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4034 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4036 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4037 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4038 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4039 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4040 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4041 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4043 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4046 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4047 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4048 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4049 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4050 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4053 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4055 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4056 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4057 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4058 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4060 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4061 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4062 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4063 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4064 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4065 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4066 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4067 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4069 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4070 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4071 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4072 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4073 device drivers and boot loader software.
4075 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4076 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4077 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4078 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4080 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4081 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4082 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4083 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4084 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4087 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4088 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4089 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4091 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4092 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4093 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4094 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4095 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4098 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4099 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4100 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4101 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4104 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4105 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4106 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4108 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4110 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4112 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4113 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4116 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4118 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4119 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4120 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4121 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4124 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4125 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4126 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4127 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4128 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4129 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4131 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4132 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4133 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4134 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4136 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4138 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4141 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4142 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4143 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4144 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4145 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4146 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4147 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4150 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4151 \k{multisec}, all support
4152 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4153 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4154 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4155 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4159 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4161 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4162 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4163 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4164 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4165 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4166 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4167 it. So the user-level directive
4171 expands to the two lines
4173 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4176 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4177 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4178 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4180 \c %macro writefile 2+
4190 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4197 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4198 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4199 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4200 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4201 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4202 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4203 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4204 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4205 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4206 code in any of several separate code sections.
4209 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4211 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4212 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4213 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4214 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4215 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4217 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4225 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4226 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4227 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4229 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4230 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4232 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4233 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4235 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4236 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4237 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4238 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4240 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4242 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4244 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4246 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4250 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4251 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4255 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4256 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4257 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4258 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4259 needs to be made resident.
4262 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4264 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4265 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4266 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4267 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4268 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4269 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4271 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4272 argument is the name of a symbol:
4275 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4277 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4278 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4279 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4280 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4281 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4282 by means of the directive
4284 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4286 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4287 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4288 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4290 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4291 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4292 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4295 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4297 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4298 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4299 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4300 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4301 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4303 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4304 the definition of the symbol.
4306 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4307 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4308 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4314 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4315 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4316 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4319 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4321 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4322 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4326 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4328 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4329 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4330 uninitialized data section, so that
4334 is similar in function to
4341 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4342 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4343 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4344 at the same piece of memory.
4346 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4347 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4348 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4349 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4351 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4352 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4354 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4355 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4356 only one argument at a time.
4359 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4361 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4362 are available on the specified CPU.
4366 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4368 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4370 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4372 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4374 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4376 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4378 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4380 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4382 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4384 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4386 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4388 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4390 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4392 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4394 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4396 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4398 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4400 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4401 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4402 instructions are available.
4405 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4407 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4408 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4411 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4413 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4415 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4417 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4419 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4421 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4423 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4425 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4426 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4427 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4429 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4430 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4433 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4435 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4436 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4437 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4438 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4439 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4440 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4442 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4443 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4444 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4445 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4446 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4447 The extensions are given with each format below.
4450 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4452 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4453 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4454 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4455 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4456 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4459 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4460 how nasm handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4462 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4463 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4464 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4465 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4467 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4468 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4469 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4470 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4473 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4475 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4476 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4477 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4478 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4480 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4487 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4488 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4489 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4490 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4491 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4492 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4493 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4496 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4497 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4499 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4500 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4501 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4502 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4504 \c section .data align=16
4506 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4507 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4509 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4510 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4511 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4512 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4515 \S{multisec} \i\c{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} support for the BIN format.
4517 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4518 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4520 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4521 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4524 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4525 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4528 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4529 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4532 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4533 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4536 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4537 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4538 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4540 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4541 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4543 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4546 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4547 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4550 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4551 alignment has been specified.
4553 \b Sections may not overlap.
4555 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4556 which may be used in your code.
4558 \S{map}\i{Map files}
4560 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4561 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4562 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4563 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4564 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4565 brackets must be used.
4568 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4570 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4571 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4572 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4573 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4575 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4577 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4578 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4579 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4580 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4583 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4584 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4585 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4587 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4588 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4589 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4591 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4592 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4593 address of the segment. So, for example:
4602 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4603 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4604 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4607 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4608 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4613 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4615 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4617 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4618 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4621 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4622 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4624 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4625 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4626 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4627 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4629 \c segment code private align=16
4631 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4632 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4633 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4635 The available qualifiers are:
4637 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4638 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4639 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4640 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4641 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4642 than stuck end-to-end.
4644 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4645 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4646 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4647 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4648 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4649 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4650 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4651 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4652 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4654 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4655 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4656 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4657 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4659 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4660 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4661 overlay-capable linker.
4663 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4664 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4665 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4666 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4668 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4669 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4670 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4671 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4673 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4674 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4675 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4676 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4677 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4678 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4680 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4681 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4684 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4686 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4687 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4688 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
4697 \c ; some uninitialized data
4699 \c group dgroup data bss
4701 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
4702 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
4703 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
4704 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
4705 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
4708 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
4709 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
4710 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
4711 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
4712 base rather than the segment base.
4714 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
4715 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
4716 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
4717 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
4719 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
4720 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
4721 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
4722 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
4725 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
4727 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
4728 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
4729 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
4730 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
4731 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
4732 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
4733 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
4735 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
4738 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4739 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
4741 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
4742 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
4743 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
4744 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
4746 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
4747 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
4748 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
4751 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
4753 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
4754 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
4755 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
4756 once you have imported it. For example:
4758 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
4761 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4762 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
4764 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
4765 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
4766 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
4767 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
4769 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
4770 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
4771 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
4772 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
4773 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
4774 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
4777 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
4778 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
4779 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
4780 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
4781 available attributes are:
4783 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
4784 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
4785 frequently used symbols imported by name.
4787 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
4788 does not make use of any initialized data.
4790 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
4791 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
4792 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
4794 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
4795 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
4801 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
4802 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
4803 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
4806 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
4809 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
4810 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
4811 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
4812 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
4813 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
4817 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
4818 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
4820 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
4824 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
4825 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
4826 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
4827 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
4829 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
4830 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
4831 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
4833 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
4834 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
4835 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
4838 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
4840 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
4841 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
4844 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
4846 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
4847 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
4848 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
4851 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
4852 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
4853 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
4857 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
4858 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
4860 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
4861 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
4862 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
4864 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
4865 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
4867 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
4868 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
4869 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
4870 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
4871 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
4873 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
4874 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
4875 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
4876 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
4877 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
4880 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
4881 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
4883 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
4884 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
4885 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
4886 declarations could equivalently be
4888 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
4889 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
4891 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
4892 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
4893 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
4895 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
4896 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
4897 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
4900 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
4902 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
4903 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
4904 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
4905 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
4907 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4909 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
4910 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
4911 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
4912 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
4913 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
4914 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
4915 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
4916 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
4919 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4920 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
4922 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
4923 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
4924 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
4925 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
4926 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
4929 The available qualifiers are:
4931 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
4932 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
4933 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
4936 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
4937 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
4938 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
4939 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
4941 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
4942 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
4945 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
4946 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
4947 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
4948 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
4949 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
4952 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
4953 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
4954 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
4955 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
4956 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
4957 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
4958 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
4959 for data (and BSS) sections.
4960 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
4961 alignment), though the value does not matter.
4963 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
4966 \c section .text code align=16
4967 \c section .data data align=4
4968 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
4969 \c section .bss bss align=4
4971 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
4973 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
4975 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
4976 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
4977 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
4978 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
4979 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
4980 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
4981 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
4982 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
4983 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
4984 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
4985 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
4986 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
4987 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
4989 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
4990 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
4991 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
4993 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
4995 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
4997 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
4998 line to source code:
5002 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5003 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5004 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5005 still be perfectly possible.
5007 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5008 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5009 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5010 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5011 table." Its typical use would be:
5014 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5015 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5016 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5019 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5020 \c push DWORD caption
5023 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5024 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5025 \c ; for exception handler
5029 \c push DWORD handler
5030 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5031 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5033 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5034 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5037 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5038 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5040 \c section .drectve info
5041 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5043 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5044 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5045 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5046 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5047 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5048 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5049 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5050 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5051 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5052 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5053 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5054 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5055 caused application failure.
5057 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5058 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5059 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5060 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5061 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5064 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5066 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5067 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5068 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5069 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5070 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5072 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5074 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5075 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5076 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5078 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5084 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5085 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5086 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5087 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5090 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5091 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5093 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5094 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5095 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5096 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5097 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5098 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5099 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5100 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5101 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5103 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5104 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5107 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5111 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5112 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5113 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5114 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5115 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5116 these image-relative references:
5118 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5119 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5120 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5124 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5125 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5127 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5128 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5129 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5130 become apparent in next paragraph.
5132 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5135 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5136 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5137 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5138 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5140 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5142 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5143 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5144 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5145 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5146 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5147 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5148 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5149 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5150 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5151 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5152 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5155 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5156 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5157 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5158 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5159 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5160 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5161 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5162 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5163 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5164 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5165 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5166 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5167 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5168 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5169 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5170 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5171 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5172 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5173 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5174 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5175 no, no trace of failure is left.
5177 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5178 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5179 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5180 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5181 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5182 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5183 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5184 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5185 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5186 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5187 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5188 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5189 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5190 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5191 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5192 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5193 terminating the application.
5195 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5196 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5197 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5198 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5199 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5204 \c extern MessageBoxA
5210 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5212 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5213 \c ; for exception handler
5219 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5222 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5223 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5225 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5226 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5227 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5228 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5229 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5230 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5231 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5232 \c section .drectve info
5233 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5235 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5236 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5237 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5238 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5239 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5240 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5241 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5242 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5243 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5244 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5245 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5246 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5247 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5248 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5250 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5251 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5252 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5253 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5254 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5255 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5256 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5257 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5258 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5259 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5260 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5261 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5262 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5263 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5264 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5267 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5268 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5271 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5274 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5275 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5276 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5279 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5280 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5281 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5282 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5283 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5286 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5287 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5288 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5289 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5290 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5292 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5293 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5295 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5296 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5298 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5299 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5300 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5301 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5303 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5305 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5306 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5307 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5308 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5309 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5312 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5313 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5316 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5318 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5319 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5321 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5323 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5324 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5325 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5327 \H{machofmt} \i\c{macho}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5329 The \c{macho} output type produces \c{Mach-O} object files suitable for
5330 linking with the \i{Mac OSX} linker.
5332 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5334 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf, elf32, and elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5335 Format} Object Files
5337 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5338 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5339 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5340 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5342 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5344 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5345 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5346 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5347 most systems which support ELF.
5349 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5350 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5352 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5353 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5354 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5355 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5356 names}, but may still be
5357 overridden by these qualifiers.
5359 The available qualifiers are:
5361 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5362 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5363 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5365 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5366 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5369 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5370 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5373 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5374 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5375 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5376 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5378 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5379 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5380 requirements of the section.
5382 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5383 thread local variables.
5385 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5388 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5389 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5391 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5392 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5393 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5394 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5395 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5396 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5397 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5398 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5399 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5400 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5401 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5403 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5404 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5405 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5408 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5409 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5411 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5412 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5413 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5414 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5415 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5417 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5418 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5419 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5420 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5423 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5424 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5425 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5426 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5428 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5429 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5430 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5431 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5432 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5433 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5435 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5436 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5437 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5438 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5440 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5441 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5442 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5443 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5444 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5445 address of the symbol.
5447 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5448 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5449 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5450 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5451 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5452 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5455 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5456 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5457 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5458 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5459 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5460 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5462 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5463 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5465 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5466 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5468 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5469 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5470 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5471 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5472 of the symbol with code such as:
5474 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5478 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5479 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5480 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5481 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5482 of the symbol with code such as:
5484 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5488 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5489 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5491 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5492 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5493 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5494 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5495 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5496 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5497 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5498 to specify these features.
5500 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5501 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5502 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5503 \c{data}.) For example:
5505 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5507 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5508 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5510 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5511 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5512 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5513 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5515 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5517 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5518 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5519 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5521 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5524 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5527 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5528 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5530 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5531 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5535 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5536 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5538 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5539 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5540 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5541 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5542 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5543 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5545 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5547 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5548 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5551 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5552 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5554 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5555 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5556 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5557 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5558 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5559 these relocations is generated.
5561 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5562 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5564 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5565 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5566 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5568 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5570 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5571 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5572 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5573 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5574 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5575 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5576 implementation does not.
5578 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5580 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5581 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5582 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5583 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5586 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5587 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5589 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5590 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5591 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5592 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5593 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5594 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5595 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5597 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5599 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5600 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5601 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5602 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5603 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5605 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5606 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5610 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5612 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5613 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5614 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5615 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5618 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5619 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5621 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5622 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5623 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5624 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5625 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5628 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5631 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5632 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5633 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5634 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5636 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5637 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5638 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5639 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5641 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5642 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5643 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5644 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5645 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5647 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5648 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5651 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5653 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5654 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5655 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5656 which is the name of the module:
5658 \c library mylib.rdl
5661 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5663 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5664 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5665 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5670 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5671 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5672 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5674 \c module $kernel.core
5677 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive\I{GLOBAL,
5680 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5681 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5682 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5683 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5684 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5686 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5689 \c global sys_open:export
5691 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5692 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5694 \c global sys_open:export proc
5696 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
5697 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
5699 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
5702 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} directive\I{EXTERN,
5705 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
5706 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
5707 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
5708 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
5709 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
5710 (function) or data object. For example:
5713 \c extern _open:import
5714 \c extern _printf:import proc
5715 \c extern _errno:import data
5717 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
5718 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
5721 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
5723 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
5724 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
5725 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
5726 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
5728 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
5729 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
5730 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
5731 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
5732 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
5733 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
5734 and in what order they happen.
5736 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
5738 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
5740 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
5741 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
5742 different object format, because each object format defines its own
5743 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
5744 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
5745 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
5746 native object format selected:
5748 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
5749 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
5751 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
5752 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
5753 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
5754 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
5755 the final diagnostic output.
5757 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
5758 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
5759 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
5760 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
5761 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
5762 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
5763 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
5765 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
5766 them all to its output file.
5769 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
5771 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
5772 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
5773 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
5774 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
5775 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
5778 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
5780 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
5781 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
5782 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
5783 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
5784 support the \c{.COM} format.
5786 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
5787 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
5788 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
5789 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
5790 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
5791 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
5792 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
5794 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
5798 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5800 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
5801 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
5803 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
5804 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
5805 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
5806 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
5807 An LZH archiver can be found at
5808 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
5809 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
5810 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
5811 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
5812 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
5813 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
5814 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
5815 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
5817 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
5818 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
5819 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
5820 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
5821 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
5822 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
5823 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
5825 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
5826 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
5827 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
5828 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
5829 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
5830 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
5841 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
5842 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
5843 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
5844 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
5845 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
5846 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
5849 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
5850 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
5851 into the resulting executable file.
5857 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
5858 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
5859 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
5860 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
5865 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
5869 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
5871 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
5873 \c segment stack stack
5877 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
5878 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
5879 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
5880 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
5881 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
5882 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
5885 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
5886 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
5887 world' and then exit.
5890 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5892 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
5893 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
5894 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
5895 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
5896 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
5899 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
5900 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
5901 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
5903 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
5904 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
5905 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
5906 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
5907 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
5908 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
5909 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
5910 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
5911 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
5913 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
5914 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
5915 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
5916 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
5917 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
5918 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
5919 explicitly issue one of your own.
5921 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
5922 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
5923 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
5924 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
5926 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
5927 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
5928 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
5929 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
5932 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
5933 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
5937 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
5939 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
5940 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
5941 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
5945 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
5947 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
5948 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
5949 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
5950 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
5958 \c ; put your code here
5962 \c ; put data items here
5966 \c ; put uninitialized data here
5968 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
5969 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
5970 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
5973 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
5974 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
5975 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
5976 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
5977 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
5980 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
5982 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
5984 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
5985 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
5986 and give the desired file name.
5989 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
5991 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
5992 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
5993 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
5994 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
5995 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
5996 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
5999 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6001 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6002 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6003 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6004 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6005 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6006 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6007 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6008 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6009 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6011 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6013 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6014 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6015 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6016 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6019 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6021 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6022 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6023 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6024 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6025 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6026 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6029 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6030 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6031 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6032 though it is not actually code.
6034 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6035 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6036 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6037 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6040 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6042 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6043 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6044 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6045 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6048 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6050 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6051 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6052 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6053 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6054 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6055 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6056 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6057 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6059 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6060 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6076 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6077 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6079 If you then declare an external like this:
6083 then the macro will expand it as
6086 \c %define printf _printf
6088 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6089 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6091 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6092 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6093 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6095 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6097 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6099 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6100 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6101 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6104 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6105 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6106 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6107 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6108 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6109 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6110 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6111 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6112 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6113 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6115 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6116 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6117 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6118 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6119 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6120 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6121 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6123 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6124 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6125 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6126 segment part of the full data item address).
6128 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6129 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6130 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6131 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6132 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6133 pointers you are passed.
6135 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6136 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6137 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6138 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6139 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6141 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6142 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6143 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6144 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6145 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6146 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6147 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6148 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6149 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6150 variables in this latter case.
6152 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6153 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6154 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6155 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6159 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6161 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6162 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6163 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6164 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6166 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6167 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6168 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6170 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6171 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6174 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6175 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6176 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6177 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6178 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6179 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6180 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6181 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6183 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6184 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6185 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6186 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6187 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6188 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6189 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6190 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6191 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6192 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6193 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6194 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6195 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6198 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6199 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6200 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6202 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6203 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6204 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6205 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6207 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6208 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6209 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6212 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6213 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6214 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6215 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6216 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6217 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6218 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6221 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6222 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6223 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6224 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6225 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6226 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6227 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6228 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6229 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6230 sequence points without performance suffering.
6232 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6233 The following example is for small model:
6240 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6241 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6245 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6249 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6250 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6251 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6252 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6253 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6254 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6256 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6257 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6261 \c ; and then, further down...
6263 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6264 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6266 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6268 \c ; then those data items...
6273 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6275 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6278 \c int myint = 1234;
6279 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6281 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6282 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6283 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6286 \c push word [myint]
6287 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6288 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6292 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6293 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6294 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6295 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6296 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6297 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6298 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6299 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6300 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6301 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6305 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6307 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6308 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6309 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6310 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6311 accessed from assembler as
6317 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6318 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6319 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6325 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6326 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6327 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6328 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6329 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6330 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6331 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6332 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6334 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6335 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6336 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6337 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6338 one offset and using just that.
6340 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6341 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6342 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6343 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6344 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6351 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6352 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6353 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6354 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6355 out how your own compiler does it.
6358 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6360 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6361 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6362 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6363 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6364 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6366 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6367 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6369 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6376 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6377 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6382 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6383 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6384 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6386 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6387 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6388 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6389 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6390 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6391 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6392 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6394 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6395 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6396 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6397 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6398 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6399 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6400 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6402 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6403 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6404 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6406 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6414 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6415 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6416 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6421 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6422 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6423 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6426 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6428 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6429 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6431 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6432 not required for Pascal.
6434 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6435 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6436 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6437 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6438 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6439 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6440 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6441 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6442 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6443 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6444 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6445 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6447 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6449 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6451 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6452 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6453 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6456 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6458 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6459 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6460 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6461 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6464 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6465 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6466 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6468 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6469 control to the callee.
6471 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6472 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6473 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6474 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6475 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6476 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6477 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6478 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6480 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6481 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6482 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6483 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6484 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6485 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6486 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6488 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6489 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6490 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6492 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6493 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6494 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6495 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6496 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6497 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6498 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6499 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6500 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6501 \c{RETF} instruction.
6503 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6504 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6505 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6506 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6507 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6508 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6511 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6512 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6515 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6516 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6522 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6523 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6524 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6528 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6530 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6532 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6533 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6537 \c ; and then, further down...
6539 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6540 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6541 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6542 \c call far SomeFunc
6544 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6546 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6547 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6550 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6553 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6554 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6555 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6556 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6557 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6560 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6561 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6563 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6564 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6566 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6567 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6569 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6570 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6573 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6575 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6576 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6577 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6578 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6579 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6580 generated with an operand.
6582 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6583 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6584 reverse order. For example:
6592 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6593 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6594 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6599 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6600 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6601 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6602 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6603 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6604 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6608 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6610 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6611 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6612 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6613 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6614 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6617 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6618 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6619 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6620 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6621 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6622 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6623 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6624 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6625 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6626 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6627 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6628 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6632 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6634 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6635 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6636 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6639 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6641 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6642 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6643 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6644 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6645 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6646 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6648 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6649 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6650 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6651 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6652 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6654 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6656 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6658 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6659 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6660 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6661 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6663 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6664 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6665 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6667 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6668 control to the callee.
6670 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6671 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6672 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6673 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6674 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6675 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6676 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6677 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6679 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6680 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6681 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6682 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6683 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6684 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6685 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6686 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6687 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6688 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6689 and type of the remaining ones.
6691 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6692 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6693 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6695 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6696 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
6697 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
6700 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
6701 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6702 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
6704 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6705 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6706 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6707 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6708 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6709 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6710 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6713 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
6714 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
6715 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
6716 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
6717 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
6718 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
6719 still pushed in right-to-left order.
6721 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
6728 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6729 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
6733 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
6736 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6737 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6741 \c ; and then, further down...
6743 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6744 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6746 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
6748 \c ; then those data items...
6753 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6755 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
6757 \c int myint = 1234;
6758 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6761 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
6763 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6764 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6765 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6766 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6767 accessed from assembler as
6772 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6773 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6774 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6779 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6780 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
6781 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6782 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
6783 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6784 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
6785 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
6786 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
6787 are also 4 bytes long.
6789 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6790 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6791 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6792 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6793 one offset and using just that.
6795 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6796 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6797 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
6798 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6799 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6806 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
6807 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6808 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6809 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6810 out how your own compiler does it.
6813 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
6815 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
6816 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6817 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6818 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6819 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6821 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6828 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
6829 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
6834 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
6835 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6836 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6838 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6839 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6840 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6841 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6842 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6843 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6844 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6846 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6847 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
6848 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
6851 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
6854 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
6855 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
6856 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
6857 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
6858 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
6860 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
6861 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
6862 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
6863 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
6865 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
6866 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
6867 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
6868 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
6870 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
6873 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
6875 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
6876 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
6877 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
6878 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
6879 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
6880 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
6881 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
6883 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
6884 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
6885 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
6886 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
6887 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
6888 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
6891 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
6893 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
6896 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
6897 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
6899 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
6900 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
6901 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
6910 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
6912 \c ; the function body comes here
6919 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
6920 second leading underscore.)
6922 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
6923 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
6924 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
6925 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
6926 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
6928 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
6929 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
6930 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
6931 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
6932 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
6933 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
6934 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
6935 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
6936 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
6937 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
6938 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
6939 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
6940 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
6941 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
6942 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
6943 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
6945 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
6946 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
6947 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
6954 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
6958 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
6960 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
6961 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
6962 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
6963 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
6964 way this works is like this:
6966 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
6968 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
6969 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
6970 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
6971 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
6973 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
6974 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
6975 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
6976 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
6977 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
6978 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
6980 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
6981 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
6982 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
6985 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
6987 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
6988 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
6989 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
6990 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
6991 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
6992 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
6993 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
6994 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
6995 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
6998 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7000 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7001 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7002 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7003 has every necessary entry present.
7005 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7008 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7010 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7011 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7012 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7013 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7014 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7015 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7018 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7020 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7026 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7028 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7033 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7034 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7035 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7036 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7037 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7038 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7039 effectively, it has become).
7041 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7042 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7045 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7047 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7048 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7049 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7050 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7051 which resides elsewhere.
7053 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7055 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7057 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7058 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7059 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7061 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7062 functions by means of
7064 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7066 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7068 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt .sym
7070 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7071 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7072 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7075 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7077 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7078 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7079 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7080 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7081 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7082 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7083 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7086 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7087 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7088 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7089 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7093 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7095 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7096 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7098 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7099 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7101 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7102 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7103 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7104 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7106 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7108 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7109 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7112 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7114 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7115 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7116 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7117 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7118 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7119 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7122 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7124 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7125 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7126 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7127 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7128 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7129 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7130 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7131 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7133 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7134 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7135 segment, so just coding, for example,
7137 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7139 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7140 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7143 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7144 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7145 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7146 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7148 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7150 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7151 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7152 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7153 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7154 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7155 segment to a 32-bit one.
7157 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7158 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7160 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7162 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7163 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7164 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7167 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7168 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7170 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7171 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7172 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7173 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7174 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7176 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7177 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7178 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7179 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7181 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7182 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7183 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7185 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7186 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7188 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7189 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7190 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7191 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7192 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7194 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7195 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7197 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7199 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7200 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7201 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7203 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7205 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7206 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7207 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7208 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7210 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7212 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7215 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7216 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7218 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7220 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7221 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7222 offset), and calls that address.
7225 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7227 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7228 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7229 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7230 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7231 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7233 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7234 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7235 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7236 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7240 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7241 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7242 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7243 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7245 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7246 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7247 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7248 instructions with implicit addressing:
7249 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7250 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7251 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7252 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7253 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7254 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7256 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7257 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7258 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7259 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7260 size from the code segment.
7262 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7263 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7264 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7265 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7266 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7267 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7272 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7273 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7276 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7277 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7280 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7282 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7283 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7284 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7285 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7287 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7288 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7289 registers, which still add their bases.
7291 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7292 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7293 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7294 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7295 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7297 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7298 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7299 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7300 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7301 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7303 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7304 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7305 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7306 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7308 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7309 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7310 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7313 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7315 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7316 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7318 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7319 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7320 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7321 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7323 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7324 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7325 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7326 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7327 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7328 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7329 can be used for this purpose.
7331 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7333 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7334 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7335 immediates to 32 bits.
7337 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7341 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7342 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7343 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7344 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7345 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7347 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7348 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7349 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7350 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7352 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7354 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7355 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7356 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7357 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7358 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7359 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7363 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7364 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7365 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7369 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7370 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7371 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7372 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7374 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7375 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7377 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7379 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7381 \W{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}\c{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}
7383 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7384 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7386 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7387 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7388 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7389 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7390 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7392 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7394 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7395 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7396 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7397 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7399 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7401 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7403 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7405 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7407 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7409 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7411 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7413 \W{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}\c{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}
7415 What follows is a simplified summary.
7417 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7418 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7419 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7420 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7421 use by the function without saving.
7423 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7425 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7426 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7427 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7429 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7431 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7433 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7435 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7437 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7439 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7440 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7441 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7442 that isn't listed here.
7445 \H{problems} Common Problems
7447 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7449 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7450 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7451 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7452 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7453 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7454 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7455 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7456 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7457 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7460 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7462 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7463 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7464 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7467 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7468 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7469 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7470 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7471 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7472 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7473 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7474 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7475 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7476 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7477 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7478 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7481 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7483 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7484 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7485 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7486 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7490 \c ; some boot sector code
7495 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7496 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7497 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7501 \c ; some boot sector code
7503 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7506 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7507 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7508 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7509 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7510 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7511 find out what's wrong with it.
7514 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7516 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7521 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7522 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7525 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7526 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7527 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7528 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7529 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7530 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7531 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7532 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7533 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7534 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7536 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7539 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7541 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7542 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7543 problem and generate sensible code.
7546 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7548 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7549 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7550 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7552 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7553 (click on "Bugs"), or if that fails then through one of the
7554 contacts in \k{contact}.
7556 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7557 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7558 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7559 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7560 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7561 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7564 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7567 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7568 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7570 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7571 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7572 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7573 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7574 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7575 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7578 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7579 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7580 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7582 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7583 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7584 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7585 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7586 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7587 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7588 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7589 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7591 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7592 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7593 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7594 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7595 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7596 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7597 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7598 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7599 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7600 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7601 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7602 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7603 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7605 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7606 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7607 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7608 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7609 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7610 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7611 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7612 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7613 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7614 should be 77 instead'.
7616 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7617 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7618 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7619 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7620 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7621 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7622 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7625 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7626 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7627 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7628 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7629 differently from us.
7632 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7634 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7636 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7639 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7640 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7641 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7642 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7643 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7645 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7646 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7647 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7648 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7652 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7654 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7655 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7656 are on a Unix system.
7659 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7661 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7663 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7665 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7666 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7667 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7668 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7670 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7671 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7672 summary of command line options.
7675 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7677 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7678 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7679 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7680 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7683 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7684 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7685 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7686 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7687 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7689 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7691 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
7696 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
7698 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
7699 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
7700 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
7701 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
7702 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
7703 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
7704 Then it will reach the code section.
7706 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
7707 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
7708 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
7709 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
7710 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
7711 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
7712 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
7715 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
7716 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
7717 only handle 8192 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
7718 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
7719 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
7720 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
7721 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
7722 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
7723 the instructions in your code section.
7725 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
7726 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
7727 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
7730 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
7734 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
7736 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
7737 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
7740 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
7743 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
7744 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
7745 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
7746 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
7747 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
7748 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
7751 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
7752 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
7753 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
7754 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
7756 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
7757 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
7758 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
7759 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
7760 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
7761 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
7762 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
7764 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
7765 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
7766 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
7767 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
7768 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
7770 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
7771 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
7772 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
7773 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
7774 you may still have to place some manually.
7776 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
7777 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
7778 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
7781 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
7782 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
7783 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
7784 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
7785 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
7786 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
7787 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
7788 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
7789 suppress disassembly of the data area.
7792 \S{ndisother} Other Options
7794 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
7795 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
7796 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
7797 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
7799 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
7800 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
7801 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
7802 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
7803 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
7807 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
7809 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
7810 possible, should be sent to
7811 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
7813 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7814 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
7815 new features as well.
7817 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
7819 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
7821 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
7822 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
7823 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
7824 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
7828 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}